ISO15552 Standard Cylinder - SE Series

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X610SG

  Specifications: SE32X610SG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 610 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 610 610 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X610SG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 610 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 2501.6 g (2.5016 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 610 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 752 mm = 142 + 610; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 704 mm = 94 + 610 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 755 mm = 142 + 610 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1365 mm = 142 + 2 × 610 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $225.80

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X80S

  Specifications: SE32X80S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 80 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 80 80 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X80S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 80 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 773.8 g (0.7738 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 80 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 222 mm = 142 + 80; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 174 mm = 94 + 80 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 225 mm = 142 + 80 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 305 mm = 142 + 2 × 80 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $93.13

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X25

  Specifications: SE32X25 — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 25 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 25 25 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X25 Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 25 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 587.3 g (0.5873 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 25 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 167 mm = 142 + 25; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 119 mm = 94 + 25 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 170 mm = 142 + 25 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 195 mm = 142 + 2 × 25 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $75.65

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE80X400S

  Specifications: SE80X400S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 80 mm bore, 400 mm stroke, medium-carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT3/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic mounting. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 80 80 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium-carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 400 400 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic mounting configuration No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT3/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE80X400S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 80 mm Stroke 400 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium-carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic mounting Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT3/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 36 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 25 mm; M20 × 1.5 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 6576.6 g (6.5766 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 2484.6 g non-stroke mass + 400 mm × 10.23 g/mm. Catalog reference estimate, not measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE80 geometry is identical with or without a magnet. Dimensions are in mm except threads. Derived overall lengths include the rear locating boss but exclude mounts, rod-end joints, air fittings, sensors and packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 614 mm = 214 + 400; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 528 mm = 128 + 400 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 618 mm = 214 + 400 + 4 Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1018 mm = 214 + 2 × 400 + 4 Body cross-section, width × height 93 × 93 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M10 (K), 19 mm deep (KA); 72 × 72 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 25 mm; E = M20 × 1.5; EA = 40 mm Locating bosses ØM = 45 mm; ØN = 45 mm; rear projection NA = 4 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 86; DA = 53; F = 26; FA = 10; H = 22 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 33; AE = 33; MA = 33; PA = 16.5; PB = 8 mm; P = PT3/8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection The current model has no selected mounting suffix. Choose mounting parts for the load path and confirm their supply separately. Optional part Application and reference F-SI80LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI80FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI80FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE80CA Rear single clevis (CA); ductile cast iron F-SE80CB Rear double clevis (CB); ductile cast iron F-SI80CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); ductile cast iron F-SE80TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI80FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI63TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI63TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M20X150I I-type rod-end joint; 608 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: NC = 20; ND = 80; NE = 102; NF = 40; NG = 30; NH = M20×1.5; NM = 20. F-M20X150Y Y-type rod-end joint; 860 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: NA = 44.4; NC = 20; ND = 80; NP = 40; NQ = 101; NM = 20; NH = M20×1.5; PA = 53.4; PB = 45.2. F-M20X150F Floating joint; 865 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: MA = 102; MB = 29; MC = 13; MD = 46; ME = 53; MF = 22; MG = 10; MH = 22; MI/MJ = M20×1.5; MK = 10°. F-M20X150U Spherical rod-end joint; 370 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: PA = 18; PB = 46; PC = 20; PD = 33; PE = 77; PF = 100; PG = M20×1.5; PH = 15°; PI = 34; PJ = 30; PK = 25. All four rod-end alternatives use M20 × 1.5; match the exact pitch. Drawing dimensions are in mm except threads and angles. CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. Joint drawings define added assembly space; add their masses only when supplied. Floating-joint MK is angular compensation; the M6-and-under radial-offset note does not apply. CMSE/DMSE require the S piston. Hardware, sensors, joints and service parts are separate unless ordered. Match SE80 seal kits, wear rings, guide bushings and covers to the actual seal and production revision; replacement magnets apply only to magnetic models. Confirm service-part codes; bore and drawing callouts alone are insufficient.Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 2513.0 N at 0.5 MPa; effective piston area 5026 mm² Theoretical retraction force 2268.0 N at 0.5 MPa; effective annular area 4536 mm² Force calculation Force (N) = effective piston area (mm²) × pressure (MPa), before friction and dynamic losses; not a safe payload rating Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duty, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; assess actual duty Required effective flow area At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 7.9 / 10.5 / 13.1 / 15.7 / 18.3 / 20.9 mm²; this is pneumatic flow area, not piston force area Tubing reference, OD × ID 300 mm/s: 10 × 6.5 mm; 400 mm/s: 10 × 6.5 mm; 500 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 600 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 700 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 800 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm Reference speeds are not guaranteed: motion depends on load, pressure, valve flow, pipe length, fittings, cushioning and exhaust backpressure. The 0.1 MPa force reference is below the SE minimum. Long strokes need support and stability checks; heavy/fast loads may need a deceleration circuit or external absorber. Separately ordered circuit examples, not a speed or stock guarantee. 300–800 mm/s reference: 5V31010B050,5V32010B050,4V31010B,4V32010B,4A31010,4A32010. B is 24 V DC; 5V suffix 050 specifies 0.5 m terminal leads, and the listed 4V uses DIN/internal pilot. 4A is air controlled, without a coil; 10/20 mean single/double control. These examples have PT ports. Valve port sizes: 300-10: supply/work 3/8, exhaust 1/4. Do not infer exhaust size from the cylinder port. Valve limits are 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20–70 °C with 40 µm or finer filtered air; obey all lower circuit limits. 4A needs separate air-pilot plumbing: the PT drawings show 1/8 pilot ports, one for single and two for double control; confirm the pilot thread for a G valve. Complete NAMUR examples based on the table families: 4M31010B,4M32010B. Use the corresponding speed band above. These DIN/24 V DC, internally piloted 4M valves have NAMUR A/B faces, not threaded cylinder outlets. A separately verified adapter arrangement is required; they do not mount directly to SE. No matching adapter order code is established here. Additional flame-resistant blue 100 m tube-coil example: UN54D100065100MBU (10 × 6.5 mm, minimum bend radius 20 mm). It is rated 1 MPa at 23 °C and −20–70 °C. Apply temperature derating and confirm actual tube/fitting compatibility. Flame-resistant tubing does not certify the machine. The reviewed PA6/PA12 tables have no matching 8 × 5 or 10 × 6.5 mm row; other IDs do not inherit these sizing references. The 16 × 11 mm reference tube is US98A160110100MBU: blue 100 m US98A coil, 1 MPa working pressure at 23 °C, −20–70 °C and 80 mm minimum bend radius. Its 3 MPa burst value is not an operating rating. Apply temperature derating. A matching 16 mm connector/control chain is not established by the listed fittings, whose sockets stop at 12 mm; do not substitute 16 × 12 tube or claim the reference speed without a verified complete flow path. Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 80 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE80 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 mm. The catalog lists a 1500 mm maximum and 1800 mm allowable stroke. Confirm non-standard orders and availability; check long-stroke rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 8–10 N·m as a PT3/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply it only to PT fittings with the specified mating seal; do not apply it automatically to G3/8 joints. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Connection and Tube-Side Options Selection Complete codes; tube sizes as labelled PC straight 6 mm OD: PC603,PC603D,PC603-S,PC603D-S; 8 mm OD: PC803,PC803D,PC803-S,PC803D-S; 10 mm OD: PC1003,PC1003D,PC1003-S,PC1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PC1203,PC1203D,PC1203-S,PC1203D-S PL elbow 6 mm OD: PL603,PL603D,PL603-S,PL603D-S; 8 mm OD: PL803,PL803D,PL803-S,PL803D-S; 10 mm OD: PL1003,PL1003D,PL1003-S,PL1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PL1203,PL1203D,PL1203-S,PL1203D-S PLL extended elbow 6 mm OD: PLL603,PLL603D,PLL603-S,PLL603D-S; 8 mm OD: PLL803,PLL803D,PLL803-S,PLL803D-S; 10 mm OD: PLL1003,PLL1003D,PLL1003-S,PLL1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PLL1203,PLL1203D,PLL1203-S,PLL1203D-S PEB branch tee 6 mm OD: PEB603,PEB603D,PEB603-S,PEB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PEB803,PEB803D,PEB803-S,PEB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PEB1003,PEB1003D,PEB1003-S,PEB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PEB1203,PEB1203D,PEB1203-S,PEB1203D-S PED run tee 6 mm OD: PED603,PED603D,PED603-S,PED603D-S; 8 mm OD: PED803,PED803D,PED803-S,PED803D-S; 10 mm OD: PED1003,PED1003D,PED1003-S,PED1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PED1203,PED1203D,PED1203-S,PED1203D-S PYB Y fitting 6 mm OD: PYB603,PYB603D,PYB603-S,PYB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PYB803,PYB803D,PYB803-S,PYB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PYB1003,PYB1003D,PYB1003-S,PYB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PYB1203,PYB1203D,PYB1203-S,PYB1203D-S PH banjo elbow 6 mm OD: PH603,PH603D,PH603-S,PH603D-S; 8 mm OD: PH803,PH803D,PH803-S,PH803D-S; 10 mm OD: PH1003,PH1003D,PH1003-S,PH1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PH1203,PH1203D,PH1203-S,PH1203D-S PHF female-branch banjo 6 mm OD: PHF603,PHF603D,PHF603-S,PHF603D-S; 8 mm OD: PHF803,PHF803D,PHF803-S,PHF803D-S; 10 mm OD: PHF1003,PHF1003D,PHF1003-S,PHF1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PHF1203,PHF1203D,PHF1203-S,PHF1203D-S PHW twin banjo 6 mm OD: PHW603,PHW603D,PHW603-S,PHW603D-S; 8 mm OD: PHW803,PHW803D,PHW803-S,PHW803D-S; 10 mm OD: PHW1003,PHW1003D,PHW1003-S,PHW1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PHW1203,PHW1203D,PHW1203-S,PHW1203D-S PZB cross fitting 6 mm OD: PZB603,PZB603D,PZB603-S,PZB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PZB803,PZB803D,PZB803-S,PZB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PZB1003,PZB1003D,PZB1003-S,PZB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PZB1203,PZB1203D,PZB1203-S,PZB1203D-S POC round straight 8 mm OD: POC803,POC803D,POC803-S,POC803D-S; 10 mm OD: POC1003,POC1003D,POC1003-S,POC1003D-S; 12 mm OD: POC1203,POC1203D,POC1203-S,POC1203D-S PKD reducing distribution fitting main 10 / branch 8 mm OD: PKD10-803,PKD10-803D,PKD10-803-S,PKD10-803D-S BPC metal straight 6 mm OD: BPC603; 8 mm OD: BPC803; 10 mm OD: BPC1003; 12 mm OD: BPC1203 BPOC metal round straight 10 mm OD: BPOC1003; 12 mm OD: BPOC1203 BKC compression fitting 6 × 4 mm OD × ID: BKC0604-03,BKC0604-03-S; 8 × 5 mm OD × ID: BKC0805-03,BKC0805-03-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm OD × ID: BKC0806-03,BKC0806-03-S; 10 × 6.5 mm OD × ID: BKC1065-03,BKC1065-03-S; 10 × 7.5 or 8 mm OD × ID: BKC1075-03,BKC1075-03-S; 12 × 8 mm OD × ID: BKC1208-03,BKC1208-03-S; 12 × 9 or 10 mm OD × ID: BKC1209-03,BKC1209-03-S BB male–male adapter male PT1/8: BB0103,BB0103-S; male PT1/4: BB0203,BB0203-S; male PT3/8: BB0303,BB0303-S; male PT1/2: BB0304,BB0304-S BD male–female adapter female PT1/8: BD0103,BD0103-S; female PT1/4: BD0203,BD0203-S BZ auxiliary plug — unused auxiliary port only BZ03,BZ03-S BSL exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BSL03,BSL03-S BSLM miniature exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BSLM03,BSLM03-S BESL throttling exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BESL03,BESL03-S PAL plastic exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only PAL03,PAL03D PSL elbow flow control 6 mm OD: PSL603A,PSL603AD,PSL603B,PSL603BD,PSL603A-S,PSL603AD-S,PSL603B-S,PSL603BD-S; 8 mm OD: PSL803A,PSL803AD,PSL803B,PSL803BD,PSL803A-S,PSL803AD-S,PSL803B-S,PSL803BD-S; 10 mm OD: PSL1003A,PSL1003AD,PSL1003B,PSL1003BD,PSL1003A-S,PSL1003AD-S,PSL1003B-S,PSL1003BD-S; 12 mm OD: PSL1203A,PSL1203AD,PSL1203B,PSL1203BD,PSL1203A-S,PSL1203AD-S,PSL1203B-S,PSL1203BD-S PSS universal flow control 10 mm OD: PSS1003A,PSS1003AD,PSS1003B,PSS1003BD,PSS1003A-S,PSS1003AD-S,PSS1003B-S,PSS1003BD-S; 12 mm OD: PSS1203A,PSS1203AD,PSS1203B,PSS1203BD,PSS1203A-S,PSS1203AD-S,PSS1203B-S,PSS1203BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 6 mm OD: PTL603A,PTL603AD,PTL603B,PTL603BD; 8 mm OD: PTL803A,PTL803AD,PTL803B,PTL803BD; 10 mm OD: PTL1003A,PTL1003AD,PTL1003B,PTL1003BD; 12 mm OD: PTL1203A,PTL1203AD,PTL1203B,PTL1203BD PSA inline flow control 6 mm OD: PSA6,PSA6D,PSA6-S,PSA6D-S; 8 mm OD: PSA8,PSA8D,PSA8-S,PSA8D-S; 10 mm OD: PSA10,PSA10D,PSA10-S,PSA10D-S; 12 mm OD: PSA12,PSA12D,PSA12-S,PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 6 mm OD: GPSA6,GPSA6D; 8 mm OD: GPSA8,GPSA8D; 10 mm OD: GPSA10,GPSA10D; 12 mm OD: GPSA12,GPSA12D PPA plug-in exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only 6 mm OD: PPA6; 8 mm OD: PPA8; 10 mm OD: PPA10; 12 mm OD: PPA12 US98A/UE95A PU tubing 6 × 4 mm OD × ID: US98A060040100MBU,UE95A060040100MBU; 8 × 5 mm OD × ID: US98A080050100MBU,UE95A080050100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm OD × ID: US98A100065100MBU,UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm OD × ID: US98A120080100MBU,UE95A120080100MBU ASC inline threaded flow control two female PT3/8: ASC30010 GAFR upstream filter/regulator female PT3/8: GAFR30010S,GAFR40010S All listed parts are separately selected alternatives, not an included kit or stock promise. Use PT3/8 cylinder fittings and the specified seal; PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. Check insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. G joints require the correct face seal and mating surface. The M20 × 1.5 rod thread is not an air port. Use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. Match OD, and compression fittings also require the stated ID. D is black and blank is gray where offered; -M is miniature. -S specifies only the stainless 304 parts identified in the component material table, not the whole cylinder/circuit. PHF has an additional female PT3/8 branch: connect or seal it as the designed circuit permits; it is not another tube socket. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings must not bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE80 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow controls are 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC is 0–0.9 MPa, 0–150 °C: the SE path is therefore no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BD/BZ is 0–1 MPa, 0–150 °C, limiting the SE path to 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit still applies. Component vacuum ratings do not approve a vacuum SE assembly. BKC0806-03 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; 8 × 5 mm tubing needs BKC0805-03. Hold the body hex during thread installation, not the tube-locking nut; insert tube fully and tighten the nut. BB/BD requires the exact size and gender shown for the second end. BD/GBD ordering identifies the female size first and male size second. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary port, never either active cylinder working port. At a cylinder port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube exhaust (meter-out), with free reverse supply; B restricts tube → cylinder supply (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; choose B only for a designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly. Flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 3/8 cap adjustment is recommended at 0.24 N·m, not pipe-thread installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls without an A/B suffix; match both tube ODs and the body check/throttle symbol. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6/PPA8/PPA10/PPA12 have 6/8/10/12 mm plain stems, requiring matching metric push-in sockets on the separately selected directional-valve exhaust. PPA uses POM body/cap and PE filter, rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise promise. PPA has no D or thread suffix. PPA and threaded silencers must not occupy cylinder working ports or serve as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match actual exhaust thread/flow and check backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. ASC is a separate female-port inline control requiring its own fittings; follow P/A and the check/throttle symbol. Its 0.05–0.95 MPa component range limits the SE path to 0.15–0.95 MPa before other lower limits. Use 40 µm or finer filtered air. GAFR300/400 S examples are separately connected upstream compressed-air filter/regulators: PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, bracket, round clip-on gauge, 40 µm element and no reverse-flow valve. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5–70 °C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment; not a vacuum regulator, cylinder-mounted part or mandatory bore-specific size. Set pressure within every downstream rating. US98A/UE95A examples are blue 100 m coils, not supplied cut lengths. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is −20–70 °C; UE95A is −40–70 °C, while the SE assembly stays within every component limit. Match OD and ID, bend radius, routing and actual flow. Only the stated selection-table tube sizes have the reference-speed association; other listed ODs do not inherit it.

  Read more less

  $481.03

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X450S

  Specifications: SE32X450S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 450 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 450 450 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X450S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 450 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 1980 g (1.98 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 450 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 592 mm = 142 + 450; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 544 mm = 94 + 450 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 595 mm = 142 + 450 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1045 mm = 142 + 2 × 450 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $185.80

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X300S

  Specifications: SE32X300S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 300 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 300 300 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X300S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 300 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 1491 g (1.491 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 300 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 442 mm = 142 + 300; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 394 mm = 94 + 300 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 445 mm = 142 + 300 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 745 mm = 142 + 2 × 300 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $148.21

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X400S

  Specifications: SE32X400S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 400 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 400 400 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X400S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 400 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 1817 g (1.817 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 400 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 542 mm = 142 + 400; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 494 mm = 94 + 400 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 545 mm = 142 + 400 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 945 mm = 142 + 2 × 400 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $173.25

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X50S

  Specifications: SE32X50S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 50 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 50 50 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X50S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 50 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 676 g (0.676 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 50 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 192 mm = 142 + 50; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 144 mm = 94 + 50 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 195 mm = 142 + 50 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 245 mm = 142 + 2 × 50 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $85.71

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X400

  Specifications: SE32X400 — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 400 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 400 400 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X400 Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 400 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 1809.8 g (1.8098 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 400 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 542 mm = 142 + 400; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 494 mm = 94 + 400 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 545 mm = 142 + 400 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 945 mm = 142 + 2 × 400 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $169.55

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X160

  Specifications: SE32X160 — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 160 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 160 160 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X160 Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 160 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 1027.4 g (1.0274 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 160 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 302 mm = 142 + 160; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 254 mm = 94 + 160 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 305 mm = 142 + 160 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 465 mm = 142 + 2 × 160 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $109.46

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X50

  Specifications: SE32X50 — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 50 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 50 50 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X50 Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 50 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 668.8 g (0.6688 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 50 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 192 mm = 142 + 50; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 144 mm = 94 + 50 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 195 mm = 142 + 50 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 245 mm = 142 + 2 × 50 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $82.01

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X100

  Specifications: SE32X100 — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 100 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and PT1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 100 100 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic cylinder without a mounting-accessory selection No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X100 Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 100 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic cylinder; no mounting-accessory code Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 831.8 g (0.8318 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 100 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 242 mm = 142 + 100; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 194 mm = 94 + 100 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 245 mm = 142 + 100 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 345 mm = 142 + 2 × 100 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = PT1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection No mounting-accessory suffix is selected. The following parts are compatible options, not a statement that a mounting kit or rod-end joint is supplied. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (PT1/8). PC601, PC601D, PC801, PC801D, POC601, POC601D, POC801, POC801D, PL601, PL601D, PL801, PL801D. PC straight; POC round straight; PL elbow. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (PT1/8). PSL601A, PSL601AD, PSL601B, PSL601BD, PSL801A, PSL801AD, PSL801B, PSL801BD, PSS601A, PSS601AD, PSS601B, PSS601BD, PSS801A, PSS801AD, PSS801B, PSS801BD, PTL601A, PTL601AD, PTL601B, PTL601BD, PTL801A, PTL801AD, PTL801B, PTL801BD. PSL elbow; PSS universal; PTL push-lock. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Other PT controls. PTL601A-M, PTL601AD-M, PTL601B-M, PTL601BD-M (6 mm mini). PSL601A-S, PSL601AD-S, PSL601B-S, PSL601BD-S, PSL801A-S, PSL801AD-S, PSL801B-S, PSL801BD-S, PSS601A-S, PSS601AD-S, PSS601B-S, PSS601BD-S, PSS801A-S, PSS801AD-S, PSS801B-S, PSS801BD-S (SUS304 variants; other parts include aluminum/PBT/POM/NBR). Same A/B and tube/color selection. Inline controls. ASC10006: female PT1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. BSL01, BSLM01, BESL01, PAL01, PAL01D, PALM01, PALM01D: match PT1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. BSL universal, BSLM mini, BESL throttling; PAL plastic, PALM mini plastic. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006B, 4V12006B, 4V21006B, 4V22006B (PT1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006, 4A12006, 4A21006, 4A22006 (PT1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006S (PT1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 5–7 N·m as a PT1/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply this only to PT fittings with the appropriate mating connection; do not silently apply it to the G1/8 option. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional PT1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated PC straight 4 mm: PC401, PC401D, PC401-M, PC401D-M, PC401-S, PC401D-S; 10 mm: PC1001, PC1001D, PC1001-S, PC1001D-S; 12 mm: PC1201, PC1201D, PC1201-S, PC1201D-S; 6 mm: PC601-M, PC601D-M, PC601-S, PC601D-S; 8 mm: PC801-S, PC801D-S POC round straight 4 mm: POC401, POC401D, POC401-S, POC401D-S; 10 mm: POC1001, POC1001D, POC1001-S, POC1001D-S; 6 mm: POC601-S, POC601D-S; 8 mm: POC801-S, POC801D-S PL elbow 4 mm: PL401, PL401D, PL401-M, PL401D-M, PL401-S, PL401D-S; 10 mm: PL1001, PL1001D, PL1001-S, PL1001D-S; 12 mm: PL1201, PL1201D, PL1201-S, PL1201D-S; 6 mm: PL601-M, PL601D-M, PL601-S, PL601D-S; 8 mm: PL801-S, PL801D-S PLL extended elbow 4 mm: PLL401, PLL401D, PLL401-S, PLL401D-S; 6 mm: PLL601, PLL601D, PLL601-S, PLL601D-S; 8 mm: PLL801, PLL801D, PLL801-S, PLL801D-S; 10 mm: PLL1001, PLL1001D, PLL1001-S, PLL1001D-S PH banjo elbow 4 mm: PH401, PH401D, PH401-S, PH401D-S; 6 mm: PH601, PH601D, PH601-S, PH601D-S; 8 mm: PH801, PH801D, PH801-S, PH801D-S PHF female branch banjo 4 mm: PHF401, PHF401D, PHF401-S, PHF401D-S; 6 mm: PHF601, PHF601D, PHF601-S, PHF601D-S; 8 mm: PHF801, PHF801D, PHF801-S, PHF801D-S PHW twin banjo 4 mm: PHW401, PHW401D, PHW401-S, PHW401D-S; 6 mm: PHW601, PHW601D, PHW601-S, PHW601D-S; 8 mm: PHW801, PHW801D, PHW801-S, PHW801D-S PEB branch tee 4 mm: PEB401, PEB401D, PEB401-S, PEB401D-S; 6 mm: PEB601, PEB601D, PEB601-S, PEB601D-S; 8 mm: PEB801, PEB801D, PEB801-S, PEB801D-S; 10 mm: PEB1001, PEB1001D, PEB1001-S, PEB1001D-S PED run tee 4 mm: PED401, PED401D, PED401-S, PED401D-S; 6 mm: PED601, PED601D, PED601-S, PED601D-S; 8 mm: PED801, PED801D, PED801-S, PED801D-S; 10 mm: PED1001, PED1001D, PED1001-S, PED1001D-S PYB Y 4 mm: PYB401, PYB401D, PYB401-S, PYB401D-S; 6 mm: PYB601, PYB601D, PYB601-S, PYB601D-S; 8 mm: PYB801, PYB801D, PYB801-S, PYB801D-S; 10 mm: PYB1001, PYB1001D, PYB1001-S, PYB1001D-S PZB cross 6 mm: PZB601, PZB601D, PZB601-S, PZB601D-S; 8 mm: PZB801, PZB801D, PZB801-S, PZB801D-S BPC metal straight 4 mm: BPC401; 6 mm: BPC601; 8 mm: BPC801; 10 mm: BPC1001 BPOC metal round straight 4 mm: BPOC401; 6 mm: BPOC601; 8 mm: BPOC801 PKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: PKD6-401, PKD6-401D, PKD6-401-S, PKD6-401D-S BKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: BKC0425-01, BKC0425-01-S; 6 × 4 mm: BKC0604-01, BKC0604-01-S; 8 × 5 mm: BKC0805-01, BKC0805-01-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: BKC0806-01, BKC0806-01-S BB male–male adapter other PT1/8: BB0101, BB0101-S; other PT1/4: BB0102, BB0102-S; other PT3/8: BB0103, BB0103-S BZ auxiliary plug BZ01, BZ01-S Threaded valve-exhaust silencers BSL01-S, BSLM01-S, BESL01-S PSL elbow flow control 4 mm: PSL401A, PSL401AD, PSL401B, PSL401BD, PSL401A-S, PSL401AD-S, PSL401B-S, PSL401BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 4 mm: PTL401A-M, PTL401AD-M, PTL401B-M, PTL401BD-M PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. PHF has an additional female PT1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. BKC0806-01(-S) accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs BKC0805-01(-S). Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. BB has two male PT ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female PT component. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $94.53

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE80X75S

  Specifications: SE80X75S — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 80 mm bore, 75 mm stroke, medium-carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and PT3/8 ports. Mounting configuration: basic mounting. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 80 80 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium-carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 75 75 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston No mounting suffix Basic mounting configuration No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table No thread suffix PT3/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE80X75S Action Double acting, single rod Bore 80 mm Stroke 75 mm; Catalog standard stroke Piston rod Medium-carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Basic mounting Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread PT3/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 36 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 25 mm; M20 × 1.5 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3251.85 g (3.25185 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 2484.6 g non-stroke mass + 75 mm × 10.23 g/mm. Catalog reference estimate, not measured or packed shipping weight. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE80 geometry is identical with or without a magnet. Dimensions are in mm except threads. Derived overall lengths include the rear locating boss but exclude mounts, rod-end joints, air fittings, sensors and packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 289 mm = 214 + 75; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 203 mm = 128 + 75 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 293 mm = 214 + 75 + 4 Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 368 mm = 214 + 2 × 75 + 4 Body cross-section, width × height 93 × 93 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M10 (K), 19 mm deep (KA); 72 × 72 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 25 mm; E = M20 × 1.5; EA = 40 mm Locating bosses ØM = 45 mm; ØN = 45 mm; rear projection NA = 4 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 86; DA = 53; F = 26; FA = 10; H = 22 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 33; AE = 33; MA = 33; PA = 16.5; PB = 8 mm; P = PT3/8 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection The current model has no selected mounting suffix. Choose mounting parts for the load path and confirm their supply separately. Optional part Application and reference F-SI80LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI80FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI80FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE80CA Rear single clevis (CA); ductile cast iron F-SE80CB Rear double clevis (CB); ductile cast iron F-SI80CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); ductile cast iron F-SE80TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI80FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI63TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI63TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M20X150I I-type rod-end joint; 608 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: NC = 20; ND = 80; NE = 102; NF = 40; NG = 30; NH = M20×1.5; NM = 20. F-M20X150Y Y-type rod-end joint; 860 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: NA = 44.4; NC = 20; ND = 80; NP = 40; NQ = 101; NM = 20; NH = M20×1.5; PA = 53.4; PB = 45.2. F-M20X150F Floating joint; 865 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: MA = 102; MB = 29; MC = 13; MD = 46; ME = 53; MF = 22; MG = 10; MH = 22; MI/MJ = M20×1.5; MK = 10°. F-M20X150U Spherical rod-end joint; 370 g catalog reference. Drawing dimensions: PA = 18; PB = 46; PC = 20; PD = 33; PE = 77; PF = 100; PG = M20×1.5; PH = 15°; PI = 34; PJ = 30; PK = 25. All four rod-end alternatives use M20 × 1.5; match the exact pitch. Drawing dimensions are in mm except threads and angles. CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. Joint drawings define added assembly space; add their masses only when supplied. Floating-joint MK is angular compensation; the M6-and-under radial-offset note does not apply. CMSE/DMSE require the S piston. Hardware, sensors, joints and service parts are separate unless ordered. Match SE80 seal kits, wear rings, guide bushings and covers to the actual seal and production revision; replacement magnets apply only to magnetic models. Confirm service-part codes; bore and drawing callouts alone are insufficient.Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 2513.0 N at 0.5 MPa; effective piston area 5026 mm² Theoretical retraction force 2268.0 N at 0.5 MPa; effective annular area 4536 mm² Force calculation Force (N) = effective piston area (mm²) × pressure (MPa), before friction and dynamic losses; not a safe payload rating Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duty, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; assess actual duty Required effective flow area At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 7.9 / 10.5 / 13.1 / 15.7 / 18.3 / 20.9 mm²; this is pneumatic flow area, not piston force area Tubing reference, OD × ID 300 mm/s: 10 × 6.5 mm; 400 mm/s: 10 × 6.5 mm; 500 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 600 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 700 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm; 800 mm/s: 16 × 11 mm Reference speeds are not guaranteed: motion depends on load, pressure, valve flow, pipe length, fittings, cushioning and exhaust backpressure. The 0.1 MPa force reference is below the SE minimum. Long strokes need support and stability checks; heavy/fast loads may need a deceleration circuit or external absorber. Separately ordered circuit examples, not a speed or stock guarantee. 300–800 mm/s reference: 5V31010B050,5V32010B050,4V31010B,4V32010B,4A31010,4A32010. B is 24 V DC; 5V suffix 050 specifies 0.5 m terminal leads, and the listed 4V uses DIN/internal pilot. 4A is air controlled, without a coil; 10/20 mean single/double control. These examples have PT ports. Valve port sizes: 300-10: supply/work 3/8, exhaust 1/4. Do not infer exhaust size from the cylinder port. Valve limits are 0.15–0.8 MPa and −20–70 °C with 40 µm or finer filtered air; obey all lower circuit limits. 4A needs separate air-pilot plumbing: the PT drawings show 1/8 pilot ports, one for single and two for double control; confirm the pilot thread for a G valve. Complete NAMUR examples based on the table families: 4M31010B,4M32010B. Use the corresponding speed band above. These DIN/24 V DC, internally piloted 4M valves have NAMUR A/B faces, not threaded cylinder outlets. A separately verified adapter arrangement is required; they do not mount directly to SE. No matching adapter order code is established here. Additional flame-resistant blue 100 m tube-coil example: UN54D100065100MBU (10 × 6.5 mm, minimum bend radius 20 mm). It is rated 1 MPa at 23 °C and −20–70 °C. Apply temperature derating and confirm actual tube/fitting compatibility. Flame-resistant tubing does not certify the machine. The reviewed PA6/PA12 tables have no matching 8 × 5 or 10 × 6.5 mm row; other IDs do not inherit these sizing references. The 16 × 11 mm reference tube is US98A160110100MBU: blue 100 m US98A coil, 1 MPa working pressure at 23 °C, −20–70 °C and 80 mm minimum bend radius. Its 3 MPa burst value is not an operating rating. Apply temperature derating. A matching 16 mm connector/control chain is not established by the listed fittings, whose sockets stop at 12 mm; do not substitute 16 × 12 tube or claim the reference speed without a verified complete flow path. Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 80 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE80 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 mm. The catalog lists a 1500 mm maximum and 1800 mm allowable stroke. Confirm non-standard orders and availability; check long-stroke rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. The catalog gives 8–10 N·m as a PT3/8 piping-thread tightening reference. Apply it only to PT fittings with the specified mating seal; do not apply it automatically to G3/8 joints. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Connection and Tube-Side Options Selection Complete codes; tube sizes as labelled PC straight 6 mm OD: PC603,PC603D,PC603-S,PC603D-S; 8 mm OD: PC803,PC803D,PC803-S,PC803D-S; 10 mm OD: PC1003,PC1003D,PC1003-S,PC1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PC1203,PC1203D,PC1203-S,PC1203D-S PL elbow 6 mm OD: PL603,PL603D,PL603-S,PL603D-S; 8 mm OD: PL803,PL803D,PL803-S,PL803D-S; 10 mm OD: PL1003,PL1003D,PL1003-S,PL1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PL1203,PL1203D,PL1203-S,PL1203D-S PLL extended elbow 6 mm OD: PLL603,PLL603D,PLL603-S,PLL603D-S; 8 mm OD: PLL803,PLL803D,PLL803-S,PLL803D-S; 10 mm OD: PLL1003,PLL1003D,PLL1003-S,PLL1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PLL1203,PLL1203D,PLL1203-S,PLL1203D-S PEB branch tee 6 mm OD: PEB603,PEB603D,PEB603-S,PEB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PEB803,PEB803D,PEB803-S,PEB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PEB1003,PEB1003D,PEB1003-S,PEB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PEB1203,PEB1203D,PEB1203-S,PEB1203D-S PED run tee 6 mm OD: PED603,PED603D,PED603-S,PED603D-S; 8 mm OD: PED803,PED803D,PED803-S,PED803D-S; 10 mm OD: PED1003,PED1003D,PED1003-S,PED1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PED1203,PED1203D,PED1203-S,PED1203D-S PYB Y fitting 6 mm OD: PYB603,PYB603D,PYB603-S,PYB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PYB803,PYB803D,PYB803-S,PYB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PYB1003,PYB1003D,PYB1003-S,PYB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PYB1203,PYB1203D,PYB1203-S,PYB1203D-S PH banjo elbow 6 mm OD: PH603,PH603D,PH603-S,PH603D-S; 8 mm OD: PH803,PH803D,PH803-S,PH803D-S; 10 mm OD: PH1003,PH1003D,PH1003-S,PH1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PH1203,PH1203D,PH1203-S,PH1203D-S PHF female-branch banjo 6 mm OD: PHF603,PHF603D,PHF603-S,PHF603D-S; 8 mm OD: PHF803,PHF803D,PHF803-S,PHF803D-S; 10 mm OD: PHF1003,PHF1003D,PHF1003-S,PHF1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PHF1203,PHF1203D,PHF1203-S,PHF1203D-S PHW twin banjo 6 mm OD: PHW603,PHW603D,PHW603-S,PHW603D-S; 8 mm OD: PHW803,PHW803D,PHW803-S,PHW803D-S; 10 mm OD: PHW1003,PHW1003D,PHW1003-S,PHW1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PHW1203,PHW1203D,PHW1203-S,PHW1203D-S PZB cross fitting 6 mm OD: PZB603,PZB603D,PZB603-S,PZB603D-S; 8 mm OD: PZB803,PZB803D,PZB803-S,PZB803D-S; 10 mm OD: PZB1003,PZB1003D,PZB1003-S,PZB1003D-S; 12 mm OD: PZB1203,PZB1203D,PZB1203-S,PZB1203D-S POC round straight 8 mm OD: POC803,POC803D,POC803-S,POC803D-S; 10 mm OD: POC1003,POC1003D,POC1003-S,POC1003D-S; 12 mm OD: POC1203,POC1203D,POC1203-S,POC1203D-S PKD reducing distribution fitting main 10 / branch 8 mm OD: PKD10-803,PKD10-803D,PKD10-803-S,PKD10-803D-S BPC metal straight 6 mm OD: BPC603; 8 mm OD: BPC803; 10 mm OD: BPC1003; 12 mm OD: BPC1203 BPOC metal round straight 10 mm OD: BPOC1003; 12 mm OD: BPOC1203 BKC compression fitting 6 × 4 mm OD × ID: BKC0604-03,BKC0604-03-S; 8 × 5 mm OD × ID: BKC0805-03,BKC0805-03-S; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm OD × ID: BKC0806-03,BKC0806-03-S; 10 × 6.5 mm OD × ID: BKC1065-03,BKC1065-03-S; 10 × 7.5 or 8 mm OD × ID: BKC1075-03,BKC1075-03-S; 12 × 8 mm OD × ID: BKC1208-03,BKC1208-03-S; 12 × 9 or 10 mm OD × ID: BKC1209-03,BKC1209-03-S BB male–male adapter male PT1/8: BB0103,BB0103-S; male PT1/4: BB0203,BB0203-S; male PT3/8: BB0303,BB0303-S; male PT1/2: BB0304,BB0304-S BD male–female adapter female PT1/8: BD0103,BD0103-S; female PT1/4: BD0203,BD0203-S BZ auxiliary plug — unused auxiliary port only BZ03,BZ03-S BSL exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BSL03,BSL03-S BSLM miniature exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BSLM03,BSLM03-S BESL throttling exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only BESL03,BESL03-S PAL plastic exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only PAL03,PAL03D PSL elbow flow control 6 mm OD: PSL603A,PSL603AD,PSL603B,PSL603BD,PSL603A-S,PSL603AD-S,PSL603B-S,PSL603BD-S; 8 mm OD: PSL803A,PSL803AD,PSL803B,PSL803BD,PSL803A-S,PSL803AD-S,PSL803B-S,PSL803BD-S; 10 mm OD: PSL1003A,PSL1003AD,PSL1003B,PSL1003BD,PSL1003A-S,PSL1003AD-S,PSL1003B-S,PSL1003BD-S; 12 mm OD: PSL1203A,PSL1203AD,PSL1203B,PSL1203BD,PSL1203A-S,PSL1203AD-S,PSL1203B-S,PSL1203BD-S PSS universal flow control 10 mm OD: PSS1003A,PSS1003AD,PSS1003B,PSS1003BD,PSS1003A-S,PSS1003AD-S,PSS1003B-S,PSS1003BD-S; 12 mm OD: PSS1203A,PSS1203AD,PSS1203B,PSS1203BD,PSS1203A-S,PSS1203AD-S,PSS1203B-S,PSS1203BD-S PTL push-lock flow control 6 mm OD: PTL603A,PTL603AD,PTL603B,PTL603BD; 8 mm OD: PTL803A,PTL803AD,PTL803B,PTL803BD; 10 mm OD: PTL1003A,PTL1003AD,PTL1003B,PTL1003BD; 12 mm OD: PTL1203A,PTL1203AD,PTL1203B,PTL1203BD PSA inline flow control 6 mm OD: PSA6,PSA6D,PSA6-S,PSA6D-S; 8 mm OD: PSA8,PSA8D,PSA8-S,PSA8D-S; 10 mm OD: PSA10,PSA10D,PSA10-S,PSA10D-S; 12 mm OD: PSA12,PSA12D,PSA12-S,PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 6 mm OD: GPSA6,GPSA6D; 8 mm OD: GPSA8,GPSA8D; 10 mm OD: GPSA10,GPSA10D; 12 mm OD: GPSA12,GPSA12D PPA plug-in exhaust silencer — valve exhaust only 6 mm OD: PPA6; 8 mm OD: PPA8; 10 mm OD: PPA10; 12 mm OD: PPA12 US98A/UE95A PU tubing 6 × 4 mm OD × ID: US98A060040100MBU,UE95A060040100MBU; 8 × 5 mm OD × ID: US98A080050100MBU,UE95A080050100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm OD × ID: US98A100065100MBU,UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm OD × ID: US98A120080100MBU,UE95A120080100MBU ASC inline threaded flow control two female PT3/8: ASC30010 GAFR upstream filter/regulator female PT3/8: GAFR30010S,GAFR40010S All listed parts are separately selected alternatives, not an included kit or stock promise. Use PT3/8 cylinder fittings and the specified seal; PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. Check insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. G joints require the correct face seal and mating surface. The M20 × 1.5 rod thread is not an air port. Use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. Match OD, and compression fittings also require the stated ID. D is black and blank is gray where offered; -M is miniature. -S specifies only the stainless 304 parts identified in the component material table, not the whole cylinder/circuit. PHF has an additional female PT3/8 branch: connect or seal it as the designed circuit permits; it is not another tube socket. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings must not bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE80 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow controls are 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C. BPC/BPOC is 0–0.9 MPa, 0–150 °C: the SE path is therefore no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. BKC/BB/BD/BZ is 0–1 MPa, 0–150 °C, limiting the SE path to 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit still applies. Component vacuum ratings do not approve a vacuum SE assembly. BKC0806-03 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; 8 × 5 mm tubing needs BKC0805-03. Hold the body hex during thread installation, not the tube-locking nut; insert tube fully and tighten the nut. BB/BD requires the exact size and gender shown for the second end. BD/GBD ordering identifies the female size first and male size second. BZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary port, never either active cylinder working port. At a cylinder port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube exhaust (meter-out), with free reverse supply; B restricts tube → cylinder supply (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; choose B only for a designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly. Flow control is not safety isolation. PTL 3/8 cap adjustment is recommended at 0.24 N·m, not pipe-thread installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls without an A/B suffix; match both tube ODs and the body check/throttle symbol. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6/PPA8/PPA10/PPA12 have 6/8/10/12 mm plain stems, requiring matching metric push-in sockets on the separately selected directional-valve exhaust. PPA uses POM body/cap and PE filter, rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise promise. PPA has no D or thread suffix. PPA and threaded silencers must not occupy cylinder working ports or serve as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match actual exhaust thread/flow and check backpressure; BESL adjustment changes backpressure. ASC is a separate female-port inline control requiring its own fittings; follow P/A and the check/throttle symbol. Its 0.05–0.95 MPa component range limits the SE path to 0.15–0.95 MPa before other lower limits. Use 40 µm or finer filtered air. GAFR300/400 S examples are separately connected upstream compressed-air filter/regulators: PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, bracket, round clip-on gauge, 40 µm element and no reverse-flow valve. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5–70 °C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment; not a vacuum regulator, cylinder-mounted part or mandatory bore-specific size. Set pressure within every downstream rating. US98A/UE95A examples are blue 100 m coils, not supplied cut lengths. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is −20–70 °C; UE95A is −40–70 °C, while the SE assembly stays within every component limit. Match OD and ID, bend radius, routing and actual flow. Only the stated selection-table tube sizes have the reference-speed association; other listed ODs do not inherit it.

  Read more less

  $265.53

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX377TCG

  Specifications: SE32CX377TCG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 377 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 377 377 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX377TCG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 377 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 1734.82 g (1.73482 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 377 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 519 mm = 142 + 377; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 471 mm = 94 + 377 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 522 mm = 142 + 377 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 899 mm = 142 + 2 × 377 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 519 mm = 142 + 377 C+stroke 471 mm = 94 + 377 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $273.07

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X523SFTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32X523SFTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 523 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 523 523 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X523SFTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 523 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 2217.98 g (2.21798 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 523 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 665 mm = 142 + 523; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 617 mm = 94 + 523 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 668 mm = 142 + 523 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1191 mm = 142 + 2 × 523 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 665 mm = 142 + 523 C+stroke 617 mm = 94 + 523 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 665 mm = 142 + 523 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $245.07

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X329SFTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32X329SFTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 329 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 329 329 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X329SFTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 329 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 1585.54 g (1.58554 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 329 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 471 mm = 142 + 329; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 423 mm = 94 + 329 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 474 mm = 142 + 329 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 803 mm = 142 + 2 × 329 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 471 mm = 142 + 329 C+stroke 423 mm = 94 + 329 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 471 mm = 142 + 329 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $196.60

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32BX74TCG

  Specifications: SE32BX74TCG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 74 mm stroke, sus304 stainless steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore B SUS304 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 74 74 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32BX74TCG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 74 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 747.04 g (0.74704 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 74 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 216 mm = 142 + 74; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 168 mm = 94 + 74 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 219 mm = 142 + 74 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 293 mm = 142 + 2 × 74 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 216 mm = 142 + 74 C+stroke 168 mm = 94 + 74 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $179.58

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32BX994SFTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32BX994SFTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 994 mm stroke, sus304 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore B SUS304 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 994 994 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32BX994SFTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 994 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3753.44 g (3.75344 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 994 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1136 mm = 142 + 994; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1088 mm = 94 + 994 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1139 mm = 142 + 994 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2133 mm = 142 + 2 × 994 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 1136 mm = 142 + 994 C+stroke 1088 mm = 94 + 994 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 1136 mm = 142 + 994 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $431.69

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX781SFTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32CX781SFTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 781 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 781 781 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX781SFTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 781 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3059.06 g (3.05906 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 781 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 923 mm = 142 + 781; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 875 mm = 94 + 781 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 926 mm = 142 + 781 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1707 mm = 142 + 2 × 781 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 923 mm = 142 + 781 C+stroke 875 mm = 94 + 781 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 923 mm = 142 + 781 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $365.90

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32CX293TCG

  Specifications: SE32CX293TCG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 293 mm stroke, sus316 stainless steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore C SUS316 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 293 293 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32CX293TCG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 293 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 1460.98 g (1.46098 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 293 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 435 mm = 142 + 293; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 387 mm = 94 + 293 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 438 mm = 142 + 293 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 731 mm = 142 + 2 × 293 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 435 mm = 142 + 293 C+stroke 387 mm = 94 + 293 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS316 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $247.15

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32AX941SFTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32AX941SFTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 941 mm stroke, sus420j2 stainless steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore A SUS420J2 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 941 941 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32AX941SFTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 941 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS420J2 stainless steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 3580.66 g (3.58066 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 941 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 1083 mm = 142 + 941; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 1035 mm = 94 + 941 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 1086 mm = 142 + 941 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 2027 mm = 142 + 2 × 941 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 1083 mm = 142 + 941 C+stroke 1035 mm = 94 + 941 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 1083 mm = 142 + 941 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS420J2 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $415.36

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X474STCG

  Specifications: SE32X474STCG — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 474 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: trunnion mounting bracket. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 474 474 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston TC Trunnion mounting bracket No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X474STCG Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 474 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Trunnion mounting bracket Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 2058.24 g (2.05824 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 474 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 616 mm = 142 + 474; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 568 mm = 94 + 474 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 619 mm = 142 + 474 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1093 mm = 142 + 2 × 474 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory TC: Trunnion mounting bracket; part F-SE32TC A+stroke 616 mm = 142 + 474 C+stroke 568 mm = 94 + 474 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; CA = 12; E = 52; F = 31 Other drawing dimensions (mm) G = 68 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection TC is used with a TCM1 or TCM2 trunnion support. Select and confirm the matching support and supplied quantities; do not assume it is included. Keep the support at the catalog mounting position. TC bracket reference: 2–3 N·m locking torque and 800 N static support force at the catalog torque. This bracket reference is not cylinder output force or a safe working-load rating for the complete machine. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $269.26

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32X616SFTCTCM1G

  Specifications: SE32X616SFTCTCM1G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 616 mm stroke, medium carbon steel piston rod, with magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 1. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore No rod-material suffix Medium carbon steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 616 616 mm stroke S With magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32X616SFTCTCM1G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 616 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod Medium carbon steel Magnetic piston With magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 1 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection Optional CMSE or DMSE sensor for this magnetic configuration; select the exact sensor separately Calculated weight reference 2521.16 g (2.52116 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 513.0 g non-stroke mass + 616 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 758 mm = 142 + 616; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 710 mm = 94 + 616 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 761 mm = 142 + 616 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1377 mm = 142 + 2 × 616 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 758 mm = 142 + 616 C+stroke 710 mm = 94 + 616 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM1: Trunnion support type 1; part F-SI32TCM1 Material Cast steel A+stroke 758 mm = 142 + 616 C+stroke 710 mm = 94 + 616 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 19; B = 66; CA = 40; D = 11 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 9; F = 60; G = 80; H = 52 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 12; J = 20; K = 50; L = 62 Other drawing dimensions (mm) M = 77; N = 12 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM1 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Compatible Magnetic Sensors This S configuration has a magnetic piston and accepts E-profile DMSE or CMSE switches in its sensor groove. The options below are ordered separately; select the output and cable for the controller, supply and installation. S does not include a sensor or connection cable. Sensor option Electrical selection and complete order codes DMSE: 2-wire electronic 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W. Direct cable: DMSE-020, DMSE-030, DMSE-050, DMSE-100. Quick connector: DMSE-M08, DMSE-M08010, DMSE-M08020, DMSE-M08030, DMSE-M12, DMSE-M12010, DMSE-M12020, DMSE-M12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-020-W, DMSE-030-W, DMSE-050-W, DMSE-100-W. DMSE: NPN 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sinking output. Direct cable: DMSE-N020, DMSE-N030, DMSE-N050, DMSE-N100. Quick connector: DMSE-NM08, DMSE-NM08010, DMSE-NM08020, DMSE-NM08030, DMSE-NM12, DMSE-NM12010, DMSE-NM12020, DMSE-NM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-N020-W, DMSE-N030-W, DMSE-N050-W, DMSE-N100-W. DMSE: PNP 3-wire 5–30 V DC; max. 200 mA and 6 W; sourcing output. Direct cable: DMSE-P020, DMSE-P030, DMSE-P050, DMSE-P100. Quick connector: DMSE-PM08, DMSE-PM08010, DMSE-PM08020, DMSE-PM08030, DMSE-PM12, DMSE-PM12010, DMSE-PM12020, DMSE-PM12030. IP68 direct cable: DMSE-P020-W, DMSE-P030-W, DMSE-P050-W, DMSE-P100-W. CMSE: 2-wire reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. CMSE-020, CMSE-030, CMSE-050, CMSE-100, CMSE-M08, CMSE-M08010, CMSE-M08020, CMSE-M08030, CMSE-M12, CMSE-M12010, CMSE-M12020, CMSE-M12030. CMSE-H: high-temperature reed contact 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits. No indicator light. Sensor rating −10 to 125 °C; this does not raise the cylinder or complete assembly temperature limit. CMSE-020-H, CMSE-030-H, CMSE-050-H, CMSE-100-H, CMSE-M08-H, CMSE-M08010-H, CMSE-M08020-H, CMSE-M08030-H, CMSE-M12-H, CMSE-M12010-H, CMSE-M12020-H, CMSE-M12030-H. A05-DMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; IP64. Direct cable: A05-DMSE-020, A05-DMSE-030, A05-DMSE-050, A05-DMSE-100. A06-DMSE: oil-resistant flex cable 2-wire electronic; 10–28 V DC; load 2.5–100 mA, max. 2.8 W; built-in IP68. Direct cable: A06-DMSE-020, A06-DMSE-030, A06-DMSE-050, A06-DMSE-100. A05-CMSE: flex-resistant cable 2-wire reed contact; 5–240 V AC/DC; meet both 100 mA and 10 W maximum limits; IP64. Direct cable: A05-CMSE-020, A05-CMSE-030, A05-CMSE-050, A05-CMSE-100. M8 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM08B020, F-ECM08B030, F-ECM08B050, F-ECM08B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M8 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM08C020, F-ECM08C030, F-ECM08C050, F-ECM08C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 2-wire CMSE / DMSE F-ECM12B020, F-ECM12B030, F-ECM12B050, F-ECM12B100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. M12 female cable: 3-wire NPN / PNP DMSE F-ECM12C020, F-ECM12C030, F-ECM12C050, F-ECM12C100. Lengths: 2, 3, 5 and 10 m, respectively. Cable codes: 020 = 2 m, 030 = 3 m, 050 = 5 m and 100 = 10 m. M08/M12 = M8/M12 male connector with 0.5 m lead; M08010/M12010 = 1 m, M08020/M12020 = 2 m and M08030/M12030 = 3 m. Match the separately ordered female cable to connector size, wire count and pin assignment; connector size alone is insufficient. Standard DMSE/CMSE and A05/A06 sensors operate at −10 to 70 °C. Use the overlap of cylinder, sensor and cable ratings. General sensors are IP64; only the listed DMSE-W direct leads and A06-DMSE have IP68. A05/A06 use direct leads only; use at least a 19 mm cable bend radius and suitable protection for the environment. For 3-wire DC sensors: brown = positive, blue = negative, black = output. NPN uses a load between positive and output; PNP uses a load between output and negative. Two-wire switches require a series load. Check residual voltage and leakage against the controller input: DMSE 2-wire max. 3.5 V / 0.06 mA; DMSE 3-wire max. 0.7 V / 0.01 mA. Connect the load before energizing and follow the selected sensor wiring diagram. Installation: loosen the sensor screw, slide the E-profile sensor into the cylinder groove, position it within the switching range, then tighten to 0.15–0.20 N·m; never exceed 0.25 N·m. Keep wiring clear of motion and high-voltage cables. Check sensing position and secure wiring after installation. The female cables above are optional for matching quick connectors; direct-lead sensors do not require them. Three-wire female cable pins: 1 brown (+), 3 blue (−), 4 black (output). Two-wire: pin 1 brown (+), 4 blue (−); pin 3 unused.Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod Medium carbon steel; standard structure uses a hard-chrome-plated, ground S45C rod 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 12 — Magnet Plastic magnet for this 32 mm magnetic cylinder 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $285.92

  View options

• 

  View options

  Airtac SE series: double-acting cylinder - SE32BX716FTCTCM2G

  Specifications: SE32BX716FTCTCM2G — Airtac SE double-acting, single-rod pneumatic cylinder; 32 mm bore, 716 mm stroke, sus304 stainless steel piston rod, without magnet, TPU seal option and G1/8 ports. Mounting configuration: front trunnion mount + trunnion support type 2. Product Catalog Download Airtac Product Catalog (PDF) For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Model Code Explained Code Meaning SE SE series, double-acting single-rod cylinder 32 32 mm bore B SUS304 stainless steel piston rod X Separator before stroke 716 716 mm stroke No S suffix Without magnet in the piston FTC Front trunnion mount TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 No seal-material suffix TPU seal option; internal O-ring materials follow the component table G G1/8 port thread Technical Specifications Parameter Value Model SE32BX716FTCTCM2G Action Double acting, single rod Bore 32 mm Stroke 716 mm; Non-standard configurable stroke; confirm order and delivery conditions Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel Magnetic piston Without magnet; a sensor is not implied included Mounting selection Front trunnion mount + Trunnion support type 2 Seal option TPU; this does not mean every internal O-ring is TPU Port thread G1/8 Working medium Clean compressed air filtered through a 40 µm or finer filter Operating pressure 0.15–1.0 MPa (1.5–10 bar; approximately 22–145 psi) Proof pressure 1.5 MPa (15 bar); not the continuous operating pressure Operating temperature −20 to 70 °C; avoid freezing condensate Piston speed 30–800 mm/s; select controls for the actual load and piping Stroke tolerance +1.5 / 0 mm Cushioning Adjustable pneumatic cushioning at both ends Series cushion-stroke reference 27 mm nominal catalog value; actual deceleration depends on stroke, load and adjustment Rod diameter and end thread 12 mm; M10 × 1.25 Sensor selection No built-in magnet. CMSE or DMSE sensing requires the magnetic S version Calculated weight reference 2839.96 g (2.83996 kg); bare-cylinder reference, excluding mounting and rod-end accessories Weight basis: 505.8 g non-stroke mass + 716 mm × 3.26 g/mm. This is a catalog calculation, not a measured or packed shipping weight. For this stainless-steel rod configuration, the basic SE32 formula is a dimensional reference estimate; the rod-material weight difference is not separately specified in the verified catalog. The selected mounting parts are excluded because their mass is not listed in the verified weight table. Actual supplied mass prevails. Features and Operation The catalog lists ISO 15552 and VDMA 24562 as the cylinder design standards; this is not a separate certification claim. Compressed air alternately drives the piston in both directions. The profiled double-acting piston seal has a compact, oil-retaining design. Square aluminum-alloy barrel without external tie rods, with adjustable end cushioning. Use external guidance where the load would bend or twist the rod. Select mounting parts to match the motion and load path. A catalog-compatible accessory is not automatically included in the delivery. External and Mounting Dimensions Basic SE32 single-rod geometry below. Dimensions are in millimeters unless a thread is specified. Magnetic and non-magnetic versions have the same catalog dimensions. These are bare-cylinder dimensions, not the maximum envelope of the complete mounted assembly or packaging. Parameter Value A + stroke, retracted 858 mm = 142 + 716; rod-thread end to rear-cover face, excluding rear locating boss AC + stroke, body face span 810 mm = 94 + 716 Bare-cylinder overall length, retracted 861 mm = 142 + 716 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Bare-cylinder overall length, fully extended 1577 mm = 142 + 2 × 716 + 3; calculated from catalog dimensions, including rear locating boss Body cross-section, width × height 46.5 × 46.5 mm (□B) Mounting holes 8 × M6 (K), 16 mm deep (KA); 32.5 × 32.5 mm centers (□KB) Rod diameter / rod-end thread D = 12 mm; E = M10 × 1.25; EA = 22 mm Locating bosses ØM = 30 mm; ØN = 30 mm; rear projection NA = 3 mm Rod-end local dimensions AB = 48; DA = 29; F = 17; FA = 6; H = 10 mm Cover and port local dimensions AD = 27.5; AE = 27.5; MA = 19; PA = 13.5; PB = 6 mm; P = G1/8 Overall lengths include the rod-thread end and rear locating boss as stated; they exclude separately fitted mounting brackets, rod-end joints, air fittings and sensors. Lettered local dimensions refer to their corresponding catalog drawing. Selected mounting dimensions follow. Their letter symbols belong to the individual accessory view; do not add unrelated dimensions or interpret them as a verified complete-assembly length × width × height. Parameter Value Selected accessory FTC: Front trunnion mount; part F-SI32FTC Material Cast steel A+stroke 858 mm = 142 + 716 C+stroke 810 mm = 94 + 716 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 74; B = 50; CA = 12; D = 32.5 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 46; F = 19; K = 10 Parameter Value Selected accessory TCM2: Trunnion support type 2; part F-SI32TCM2 Material Aluminum alloy A+stroke 858 mm = 142 + 716 Other drawing dimensions (mm) AA = 14; B = 52; CA = 12; D = 20 Other drawing dimensions (mm) E = 50; F = 66; G = 80; H = 32 Other drawing dimensions (mm) I = 46; K = 11; L = 7; M = 30 For detailed product dimensions and mounting drawings, please download and refer to the PDF catalog. Assembly and Accessory Selection This product code identifies the FTC front-trunnion and TCM2 support combination. The catalog permits FTC with TCM1 or TCM2. Check the order specification for the supplied parts and quantities; the code alone is not a packing list. Keep the support at the specified mounting position. Optional part Application F-SI32LB Foot mount (LB); low-carbon steel F-SI32FA Front flange (FA); aluminum alloy F-SI32FA Rear flange (FB); aluminum alloy F-SE32CA Rear single clevis (CA); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32CB Rear double clevis (CB); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SI32CR Rear pivot support used with CB (CR); spheroidal graphite cast iron F-SE32TC Trunnion mounting bracket (TC) F-SI32FTC Front trunnion mount (FTC); cast steel F-SI32TCM1 Trunnion support type 1 (TCM1); cast steel F-SI32TCM2 Trunnion support type 2 (TCM2); aluminum alloy F-M10X125I I-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 75 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125Y Y-type rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 86 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125F Floating joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 107 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied F-M10X125U Rod-end bearing / spherical rod-end joint; M10 × 1.25 connection; 69 g catalog accessory reference, only added to assembly mass when actually supplied CR requires CB; FTC and TC pair with TCM1 or TCM2. CMSE and DMSE sensors require the magnetic S cylinder. Sensor electrical ratings belong to the selected sensor, not to the air cylinder. Installation hardware, sensors, rod-end joints and service parts must be specified separately unless confirmed in the order. For maintenance, match the SE32 seal kit, wear ring, guide bushing and front/rear covers to the actual seal material and production revision. A replacement magnet applies only to the magnetic version. Confirm the exact service-part number before ordering; cylinder size or an internal drawing number alone is insufficient. Force and System Selection Parameter Value Theoretical extension force 402 N at 0.5 MPa Theoretical retraction force 345 N at 0.5 MPa Load selection Allow for friction, acceleration and service margin. Theoretical force is not a safe payload rating. Catalog load-ratio guidance Up to 0.7 for static/low-speed duties, 0.5 at 50–500 mm/s and 0.3 above 500 mm/s; select for the actual duty Effective flow-area reference At 300 / 400 / 500 / 600 / 700 / 800 mm/s: 1.3 / 1.7 / 2.1 / 2.5 / 2.9 / 3.4 mm² respectively Tubing reference, outside / inside diameter 6 / 4 mm at 300–500 mm/s; 8 / 5 mm at 600–800 mm/s Circuit accessories. Order separately; alternatives below are not an included kit. Check clearance, load, flow, tube length, control logic and the lowest component pressure/temperature limits. Match each joint; upstream valve threads may differ from cylinder threads. Cylinder fittings (G1/8). GPC601, GPC601D, GPC801, GPC801D, GPL601, GPL601D, GPL801, GPL801D. GPC straight; GPL elbow; gasket seal. 601 = 6 mm tube OD; 801 = 8 mm. D = black; no D = gray. Port speed controls (G1/8). GPTL601A, GPTL601AD, GPTL601B, GPTL601BD, GPTL801A, GPTL801AD, GPTL801B, GPTL801BD, GPSS601A, GPSS601AD, GPSS601B, GPSS601BD, GPSS801A, GPSS801AD, GPSS801B, GPSS801BD. GPTL push-lock; GPSS universal. A = meter-out (normal double-acting circuit); B = meter-in only for a designed meter-in circuit. Tube/color codes as above. Inline controls. ASC10006G: female G1/8 ports, needs separate fittings; 0.05–0.95 MPa. PSA6, PSA6D, PSA8, PSA8D: tube-to-tube, 6/8 mm OD. Orient controlled flow correctly. Valve exhaust silencers. GBSL01, GBSLM01, GBESL01: match G1/8 valve exhaust, never cylinder working ports. GBSL universal, GBSLM mini, GBESL throttling. Check backpressure/flow. Directional valves. 5V11006B050, 5V12006B050, 5V21006B050, 5V22006B050 (PT1/8, DC24V, 0.5 m leads); 4V11006BG, 4V12006BG, 4V21006BG, 4V22006BG (G1/8, DC24V, DIN); 4A11006G, 4A12006G, 4A21006G, 4A22006G (G1/8, external control air). 10/20 = single/double solenoid (5V/4V) or pneumatic pilot (4A). 5V/4V are internally piloted. These examples require 0.15–0.8 MPa and 40 µm or finer filtration. Use DC24V for the listed electrical codes. PT valves need PT fittings at valve ends. 4M NAMUR valves require a verified adapter/manifold; no SE direct mounting is established. Tubing examples. US98A060040100MBU, US98A080050100MBU, UE95A060040100MBU, UE95A080050100MBU, PA6060040100MBU, PA12060040100MBU, UN54D060040100MBU, UN54D080050100MBU. Blue 100 m coils, not included cut lengths: US/UE = PU; PA6/PA12 = nylon; UN = flame-resistant. 060040 = 6×4 mm OD×ID; 080050 = 8×5 mm. Reference speeds 300–500 / 600–800 mm/s respectively, not guarantees. PU rating 1 MPa at 23°C derates with temperature; check bend radius and all material ratings. Upstream filter/regulator. GAFR20006SG (G1/8): 40 µm, PC bowl, manual/differential-pressure drain, gauge/bracket. Inlet ≤1 MPa; setting 0.15–0.9 MPa; −5 to 70°C, non-freezing. Check required flow, pressure drop, condensate and bowl environment. Not cylinder-mounted or a bore-specific mandatory size; set pressure within every downstream rating.Internal Components Catalog item Material / scope 1 — Rod-end nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification 2 — Piston rod SUS304 stainless steel 3 — Front-cover O-ring TPU 4 — Front cover Aluminum alloy 5 — Bushing Wear-resistant material 6 — Cushion O-ring TPU 7 — Cylinder barrel Aluminum alloy 8 — O-ring NBR 9 — Piston Aluminum alloy 10 — Piston O-ring NBR 11 — Wear ring Wear-resistant material 13 — Hexagon socket screw Carbon steel 14 — Cushion seal TPU 15 — Rear cover Aluminum alloy 16 — Pillar nut Carbon steel or stainless steel, according to the supplied part specification Catalog item 12 is the magnetic-version magnet and is not included in this non-magnetic configuration. Series Ordering Options The following are series options, not additional features of this model. SE is single rod; SED is double rod; SEJ is double rod with adjustable stroke. Their dimensions and weight formulas differ. Rod material: omitted = medium carbon steel, A = SUS420J2, B = SUS304, C = SUS316. Seal option: omitted = TPU, H = fluororubber, N = NBR. S selects the magnetic piston; omitted selects no magnet. Port thread: omitted = PT, G = G thread. A different seal code alone does not establish a higher operating-temperature rating. SE32 catalog standard strokes are 25, 50, 75, 80, 100, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm. The catalog separately lists a 1000 mm maximum stroke and an 1800 mm allowable stroke. Other strokes are configurable subject to order conditions; this does not mean every stroke is standard stock. Select a long-stroke installation for rod support, load direction and stability. Installation and Maintenance Installation and servicing should be performed by trained personnel. Isolate power and air and release residual pressure before servicing; prevent sudden rod movement during restart. Protect against dust, splash, corrosive media and freezing condensate; use suitable components for special environments. Keep magnetic versions away from strong external magnetic fields. Provide guarding and suitable measures against unintended movement or dropped loads after pressure loss. The cylinder alone is not a safety holding device. Factory prelubrication generally permits operation without added oil. If lubrication is used, use additive-free ISO VG32 turbine oil and continue lubrication once started; do not use engine or spindle oil. Use clean, properly treated compressed air and flush piping before connection. Keep thread sealant or tape clear of the first one to two threads to prevent contamination. Adjust air cushioning for the actual load and speed; avoid side loading and protect the rod surface. Cap ports and protect against corrosion during extended storage. Install speed controls at both cylinder ports. For commissioning, start with the flow controls closed and open them gradually from low speed; exhaust throttling is commonly used for stable speed. Adjust the cushion needle for the load and speed so the piston does not strike the end cover or rebound; do not force the cushion adjustment screw. Keep the rod axis aligned with the load motion. Guide external loads separately to avoid bending, side load and torque on the rod; support long-stroke installations against sag and vibration. Use a pivoting cylinder mount for swinging linkages instead of forcing a foot-mounted cylinder to follow an arc. Select front/rear flange orientation for the predominant load direction. Inspect seals, mount fixings, air leaks and rod condition periodically. Use service parts matched to the exact cylinder, seal material and revision; internal drawing numbers are not independent order codes. Additional Connection and Tube-Side Options Additional optional G1/8 and metric tube-side selections below supplement the codes already listed above. Parts are selected and sold separately; this is not an included kit or a promise of stock. Match the exact thread and specified seal, insertion depth, tool/rotation clearance, flow and tube loading. PT, G and NPT are not interchangeable. The M10 × 1.25 rod thread is not an air port. Selection Additional complete codes; tube OD unless stated GPC straight 10 mm: GPC1001, GPC1001D; 12 mm: GPC1201, GPC1201D GPL elbow 10 mm: GPL1001, GPL1001D; 12 mm: GPL1201, GPL1201D GPC miniature straight 4 mm: GPC401-M, GPC401D-M; 6 mm: GPC601-M, GPC601D-M GPL miniature elbow 4 mm: GPL401-M, GPL401D-M; 6 mm: GPL601-M, GPL601D-M GPLL extended elbow 4 mm: GPLL401, GPLL401D; 6 mm: GPLL601, GPLL601D; 8 mm: GPLL801, GPLL801D; 10 mm: GPLL1001, GPLL1001D GPEB branch tee 4 mm: GPEB401, GPEB401D; 6 mm: GPEB601, GPEB601D; 8 mm: GPEB801, GPEB801D; 10 mm: GPEB1001, GPEB1001D GPED run tee 4 mm: GPED401, GPED401D; 6 mm: GPED601, GPED601D; 8 mm: GPED801, GPED801D; 10 mm: GPED1001, GPED1001D GPYB Y 4 mm: GPYB401, GPYB401D; 6 mm: GPYB601, GPYB601D; 8 mm: GPYB801, GPYB801D; 10 mm: GPYB1001, GPYB1001D GPH banjo elbow 4 mm: GPH401, GPH401D; 6 mm: GPH601, GPH601D; 8 mm: GPH801, GPH801D GPHF female branch banjo 4 mm: GPHF401, GPHF401D; 6 mm: GPHF601, GPHF601D; 8 mm: GPHF801, GPHF801D GPHW twin banjo 4 mm: GPHW401, GPHW401D; 6 mm: GPHW601, GPHW601D; 8 mm: GPHW801, GPHW801D GPZB cross 6 mm: GPZB601, GPZB601D; 8 mm: GPZB801, GPZB801D GPKD reducing distribution fitting main 6 / branch 4 mm: GPKD6-401, GPKD6-401D GBPC metal straight 4 mm: GBPC401; 6 mm: GBPC601; 8 mm: GBPC801; 10 mm: GBPC1001 GBKC compression fitting 4 × 2.5 mm: GBKC0425-01; 6 × 4 mm: GBKC0604-01; 8 × 5 mm: GBKC0805-01; 8 × 5.5 or 6 mm: GBKC0806-01 GBB male–male adapter other male G1/8: GBB0101; other male G1/4: GBB0102; other male G3/8: GBB0103 GBZ auxiliary plug GBZ01 PSA / PSA-S inline flow control 4 mm: PSA4, PSA4-S, PSA4D, PSA4D-S; 6 mm: PSA6-S, PSA6D-S; 8 mm: PSA8-S, PSA8D-S; 10 mm: PSA10, PSA10-S, PSA10D, PSA10D-S; 12 mm: PSA12, PSA12-S, PSA12D, PSA12D-S GPSA inline flow control 4 mm: GPSA4, GPSA4D; 6 mm: GPSA6, GPSA6D; 8 mm: GPSA8, GPSA8D; 10 mm: GPSA10, GPSA10D; 12 mm: GPSA12, GPSA12D PPA valve-exhaust silencer 6 mm: PPA6; 8 mm: PPA8; 10 mm: PPA10; 12 mm: PPA12 PU tube, OD × ID 4 × 2.5 mm: US98A040025100MBU, UE95A040025100MBU; 10 × 6.5 mm: US98A100065100MBU, UE95A100065100MBU; 12 × 8 mm: US98A120080100MBU, UE95A120080100MBU Push-in and flow-control options use suitable soft nylon or PU tube. D means black and blank grey only where offered; -M is miniature and -S denotes specified stainless 304 parts, not necessarily an all-stainless body. Match tube OD; compression fittings also require the stated ID. GPHF has an additional female G1/8 port that needs its own intentional mating connection or permitted closure. Tees, Y, cross and distribution fittings share a flow path: never bridge the two cylinder chambers or unrelated control circuits. SE32 operates at 0.15–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. Ordinary push-in and listed flow-control components are rated 0–1 MPa and −20–70 °C. GBPC: 0–0.9 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–0.9 MPa and 0–70 °C. GBKC/GBB/GBZ: 0–1 MPa and 0–150 °C, giving an SE32 path no wider than 0.15–1 MPa and 0–70 °C. Apply every lower selected valve, tube and sensor limit; the directional-valve examples above limit their circuit to 0.8 MPa. Component negative-pressure ratings do not establish an SE32 vacuum assembly rating. GBKC0806-01 accepts 8 × 5.5 or 8 × 6 mm tube; the 8 × 5 mm PU example needs GBKC0805-01. Hold the fitting body during threaded installation, insert the tube fully and then tighten the nut. GBB has two male G ends: 0101 is 1/8 to 1/8, 0102 is 1/8 to 1/4, and 0103 is 1/8 to 3/8; the other end needs a matching female G component. GBZ closes only a permitted unused auxiliary connection, never either active SE32 working port. At the cylinder working port, A restricts cylinder/thread → tube flow (meter-out), with free reverse feed; B restricts tube → cylinder flow (meter-in). Use A for the usual double-acting exhaust-control circuit; B only for an intentionally designed meter-in circuit. Start closed and open slowly; flow control is not safety isolation. GPTL 1/8 cap adjustment: recommended 0.08 N·m, not threaded installation torque. PSA/GPSA are threadless tube-to-tube controls for either PT or G circuits; match both tube ODs and the body flow symbol. They have no A/B ordering suffix. The G in GPSA does not specify a G-thread port. PPA6, PPA8, PPA10 and PPA12 have plain 6, 8, 10 and 12 mm stems respectively; they need a matching push-in socket on a separately selected directional-valve exhaust route. PPA: POM body/cap and PE filter, 0–1 MPa, −20–70 °C; 25 dB at 0.5 MPa is a catalog test, not a site-noise guarantee. No D or thread suffix applies. PPA and threaded silencers must never occupy SE32 working ports or act as inlet filters or safety shutoffs. Match the actual valve exhaust and check flow/backpressure; GBESL adjustment changes backpressure. The added US98A/UE95A codes are separately sold blue 100 m coils. Their 1 MPa rating is at 23 °C and requires temperature derating. US98A is rated −20–70 °C; UE95A −40–70 °C, but the SE32 assembly remains within the intersection of all limits. The additional 4, 10 and 12 mm sizes do not inherit the earlier 6 × 4 / 8 × 5 mm speed references. Check bend radius, routing, pressure, load, pipe length and actual flow; retain the earlier PA and UN alternatives where suitable.

  Read more less

  $341.35

  View options

Show more products